mac80211: propagate beacon tx mode to the driver
[openwrt/staging/blogic.git] / include / net / mac80211.h
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26 /**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35 /**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 */
48
49 /**
50 * DOC: Warning
51 *
52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56 /**
57 * DOC: Frame format
58 *
59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 */
72
73 /**
74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
88 /**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 *
118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122 * .release_buffered_frames().
123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126 */
127
128 struct device;
129
130 /**
131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132 *
133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135 */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
142
143 /**
144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149 */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
155 };
156
157 /**
158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159 *
160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162 *
163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172 */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 u16 txop;
175 u16 cw_min;
176 u16 cw_max;
177 u8 aifs;
178 bool acm;
179 bool uapsd;
180 bool mu_edca;
181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190
191 /**
192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
206 };
207
208 /**
209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210 *
211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213 *
214 * @def: the channel definition
215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224 */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228
229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230
231 bool radar_enabled;
232
233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235
236 /**
237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248 * for changes/removal.)
249 */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254
255 /**
256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257 *
258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261 * done.
262 *
263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266 */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272
273 /**
274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275 *
276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278 *
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280 * also implies a change in the AID.
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304 * changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309 * context had been assigned.
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313 * keep alive) changed.
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320 *
321 */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
324 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
325 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
326 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
327 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
328 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
330 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
331 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
333 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
334 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
335 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
336 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
337 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
338 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
339 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
340 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
341 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
342 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
343 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
344 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
345 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
346 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
347 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
348 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
349 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
350 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
351 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
352 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
353
354 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 };
356
357 /*
358 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
359 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
360 * filtering will be disabled.
361 */
362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
363
364 /**
365 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
366 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
370 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
371 * once each time the timeout triggers.
372 */
373 enum ieee80211_event_type {
374 RSSI_EVENT,
375 MLME_EVENT,
376 BAR_RX_EVENT,
377 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 };
379
380 /**
381 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
382 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
383 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
384 */
385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
387 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
388 };
389
390 /**
391 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
393 */
394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
395 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
396 };
397
398 /**
399 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
400 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
403 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404 */
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
406 AUTH_EVENT,
407 ASSOC_EVENT,
408 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
409 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 };
411
412 /**
413 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
414 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
415 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
416 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
417 */
418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
419 MLME_SUCCESS,
420 MLME_DENIED,
421 MLME_TIMEOUT,
422 };
423
424 /**
425 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
427 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
428 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
429 */
430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
431 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
432 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
433 u16 reason;
434 };
435
436 /**
437 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
438 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
439 * @tid: the tid
440 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441 */
442 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
443 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
444 u16 tid;
445 u16 ssn;
446 };
447
448 /**
449 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454 * @u:union holding the fields above
455 */
456 struct ieee80211_event {
457 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
458 union {
459 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 } u;
463 };
464
465 /**
466 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
467 *
468 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
469 *
470 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
471 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
472 */
473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
474 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
475 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
476 };
477
478 /**
479 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480 *
481 * @lci: LCI subelement content
482 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
483 * @lci_len: LCI data length
484 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
485 */
486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
487 const u8 *lci;
488 const u8 *civicloc;
489 size_t lci_len;
490 size_t civicloc_len;
491 };
492
493 /**
494 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
495 *
496 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
497 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
498 *
499 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503 * ACK, BACK or both
504 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
512 * @assoc: association status
513 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
514 * or not
515 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
516 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
517 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
518 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
519 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
520 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
521 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
522 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
523 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
524 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
525 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
526 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
527 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
528 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
529 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
530 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
531 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
532 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
533 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
534 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
535 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
536 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
537 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
538 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
539 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
540 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
541 * the current band.
542 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
543 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
544 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
545 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
546 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
547 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
548 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
549 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
550 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
551 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
552 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
553 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
554 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
555 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
556 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
557 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
558 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
559 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
560 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
561 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
562 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
563 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
564 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
565 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
566 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
567 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
568 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
569 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
570 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
571 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
572 * your driver/device needs to do.
573 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
574 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
575 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
576 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
577 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
578 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
579 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
580 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
581 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
582 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
583 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
584 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
585 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
586 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
587 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
588 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
589 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
590 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
591 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
592 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
593 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
594 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
595 * station.
596 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
597 * responder functionality.
598 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
599 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
600 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
601 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
602 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
603 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
604 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
605 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
606 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
607 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
608 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
609 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
610 * @multi_bssid: the multi bssid settings of the AP.
611 * @beacon_tx_mode: the beacon tx mode. This can be staggered or burst.
612 */
613 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
614 const u8 *bssid;
615 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
616 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
617 bool uora_exists;
618 bool ack_enabled;
619 u8 uora_ocw_range;
620 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
621 bool he_support;
622 bool twt_requester;
623 bool twt_responder;
624 bool twt_protected;
625 /* association related data */
626 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
627 bool ibss_creator;
628 u16 aid;
629 /* erp related data */
630 bool use_cts_prot;
631 bool use_short_preamble;
632 bool use_short_slot;
633 bool enable_beacon;
634 u8 dtim_period;
635 u16 beacon_int;
636 u16 assoc_capability;
637 u64 sync_tsf;
638 u32 sync_device_ts;
639 u8 sync_dtim_count;
640 u32 basic_rates;
641 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
642 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
643 u16 ht_operation_mode;
644 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
645 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
646 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
647 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
648 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
649 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
650 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
651 int arp_addr_cnt;
652 bool qos;
653 bool idle;
654 bool ps;
655 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
656 size_t ssid_len;
657 bool hidden_ssid;
658 int txpower;
659 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
660 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
661 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
662 u16 max_idle_period;
663 bool protected_keep_alive;
664 bool ftm_responder;
665 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
666 /* Multiple BSSID data */
667 bool nontransmitted;
668 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
669 u8 bssid_index;
670 u8 bssid_indicator;
671 bool ema_ap;
672 u8 profile_periodicity;
673 struct {
674 u32 params;
675 u16 nss_set;
676 } he_oper;
677 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
678 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
679 struct ieee80211_multi_bssid multi_bssid;
680 enum nl80211_beacon_tx_mode beacon_tx_mode;
681 };
682
683 /**
684 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
685 *
686 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
687 *
688 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
689 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
690 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
691 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
692 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
693 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
694 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
695 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
696 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
697 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
698 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
699 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
700 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
701 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
702 * station
703 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
704 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
705 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
706 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
707 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
708 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
709 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
710 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
711 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
712 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
713 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
714 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
715 * hardware queue.
716 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
717 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
718 * is for the whole aggregation.
719 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
720 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
722 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
723 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
724 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
725 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
726 * off-channel operation.
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
728 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
729 * it can be sent out.
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
731 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
733 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
734 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
735 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
736 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
738 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
739 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
740 * queue gets full.
741 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
742 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
743 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
745 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
746 * should kick the MLME state machine.
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
748 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
749 * status to user space)
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
752 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
754 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
755 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
756 * handled properly by the device.
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
758 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
759 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
760 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
761 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
762 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
764 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
765 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
766 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
767 * PS-Poll responses.
768 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
769 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
770 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
772 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
773 * monitor injection).
774 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
775 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
776 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
777 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
778 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
779 *
780 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
781 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
782 */
783 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
784 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
785 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
786 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
787 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
788 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
789 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
790 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
791 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
792 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
793 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
794 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
795 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
796 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
797 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
798 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
799 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
800 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
802 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
803 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
804 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
805 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
809 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
811 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
815 };
816
817 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
818
819 /**
820 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
821 *
822 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
823 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
824 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
825 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
826 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
827 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
828 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
829 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
830 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
831 * (header conversion)
832 *
833 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
834 */
835 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
836 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
837 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
838 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
839 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
840 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
841 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
842 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(6),
843 };
844
845 /*
846 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
847 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
848 */
849 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
850 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
851 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
852 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
853 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
854 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
855 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
856 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
857
858 /**
859 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
860 * Rate Control algorithm.
861 *
862 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
863 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
864 *
865 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
866 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
867 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
868 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
869 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
870 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
871 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
872 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
873 * Greenfield mode.
874 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
875 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
876 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
877 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
878 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
879 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
880 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
881 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
882 */
883 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
884 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
885 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
886 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
887
888 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
889 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
890 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
891 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
892 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
893 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
894 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
895 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
896 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
897 };
898
899
900 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
901 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
902
903 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
904 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
905
906 /* maximum number of rate stages */
907 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
908
909 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
910 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
911
912 /**
913 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
914 *
915 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
916 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
917 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
918 *
919 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
920 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
921 *
922 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
923 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
924 *
925 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
926 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
927 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
928 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
929 * information::
930 *
931 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
932 *
933 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
934 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
935 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
936 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
937 * information should then contain::
938 *
939 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
940 *
941 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
942 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
943 */
944 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
945 s8 idx;
946 u16 count:5,
947 flags:11;
948 } __packed;
949
950 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
951
952 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
953 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
954 {
955 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
956 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
957 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
958 }
959
960 static inline u8
961 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
962 {
963 return rate->idx & 0xF;
964 }
965
966 static inline u8
967 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
968 {
969 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
970 }
971
972 /**
973 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
974 *
975 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
976 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
977 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
978 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
979 *
980 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
981 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
982 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
983 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
984 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
985 * @control: union part for control data
986 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
987 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
988 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
989 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
990 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
991 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
992 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
993 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
994 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
995 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
996 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
997 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
998 * @pad: padding
999 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1000 * @status: union part for status data
1001 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1002 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1003 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1004 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1005 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1006 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
1007 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1008 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1009 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1010 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1011 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1012 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1013 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1014 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1015 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1016 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1017 */
1018 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1019 /* common information */
1020 u32 flags;
1021 u32 band:3,
1022 ack_frame_id:13,
1023 hw_queue:4,
1024 tx_time_est:10;
1025 /* 2 free bits */
1026
1027 union {
1028 struct {
1029 union {
1030 /* rate control */
1031 struct {
1032 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1033 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1034 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1035 u8 use_rts:1;
1036 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1037 u8 short_preamble:1;
1038 u8 skip_table:1;
1039 /* 2 bytes free */
1040 };
1041 /* only needed before rate control */
1042 unsigned long jiffies;
1043 };
1044 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1046 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1047 u32 flags;
1048 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1049 } control;
1050 struct {
1051 u64 cookie;
1052 } ack;
1053 struct {
1054 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1055 s32 ack_signal;
1056 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1057 u8 ampdu_len;
1058 u8 antenna;
1059 u16 tx_time;
1060 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1061 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1062 } status;
1063 struct {
1064 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1065 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1066 u8 pad[4];
1067
1068 void *rate_driver_data[
1069 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1070 };
1071 void *driver_data[
1072 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1073 };
1074 };
1075
1076 static inline u16
1077 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1078 {
1079 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1080 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1081 */
1082 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1083 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1084 }
1085
1086 static inline u16
1087 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1088 {
1089 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1090 }
1091
1092 /**
1093 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1094 *
1095 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1096 * @info: Basic tx status information
1097 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1098 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1099 */
1100 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1101 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1102 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1103 struct sk_buff *skb;
1104 struct rate_info *rate;
1105 };
1106
1107 /**
1108 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1109 *
1110 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1111 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1112 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1113 *
1114 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1115 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1116 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1117 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1118 */
1119 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1120 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1121 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1122 const u8 *common_ies;
1123 size_t common_ie_len;
1124 };
1125
1126
1127 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1128 {
1129 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1130 }
1131
1132 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1133 {
1134 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1135 }
1136
1137 /**
1138 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1139 *
1140 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1141 *
1142 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1143 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1144 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1145 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1146 *
1147 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1148 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1149 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1150 */
1151 static inline void
1152 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1153 {
1154 int i;
1155
1156 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1157 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1158 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1159 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1160 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1161 /* clear the rate counts */
1162 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1163 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1164
1165 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1166 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1167 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1168 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1169 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1170 }
1171
1172
1173 /**
1174 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1175 *
1176 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1177 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1178 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1179 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1180 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1181 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1182 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1183 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1184 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1185 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1186 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1187 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1188 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1189 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1190 * de-duplication by itself.
1191 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1192 * the frame.
1193 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1194 * the frame.
1195 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1196 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1197 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1198 * merging.
1199 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1200 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1201 * (including FCS) was received.
1202 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1203 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1204 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1205 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1206 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1207 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1208 * each A-MPDU
1209 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1210 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1211 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1212 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1213 * on this subframe
1214 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1215 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1216 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1217 * done by the hardware
1218 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1219 * processing it in any regular way.
1220 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1221 * them for sniffing purposes.
1222 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1223 * monitor interfaces.
1224 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1225 * them for sniffing purposes.
1226 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1227 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1228 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1229 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1230 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1231 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1232 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1233 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1234 * interleaved with other frames.
1235 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1236 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1237 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1238 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1239 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1240 * the first subframe.
1241 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1242 * be done in the hardware.
1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1244 * frame
1245 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1246 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1247 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1248 *
1249 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1250 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1251 * - DATA3_CODING
1252 * - DATA5_GI
1253 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1254 * - DATA6_NSTS
1255 * - DATA3_STBC
1256 *
1257 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1258 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1259 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1260 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1261 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1262 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1263 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1264 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1265 */
1266 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1267 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1268 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1269 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1270 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1271 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1272 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1273 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1274 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1275 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1276 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1277 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1278 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1279 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1280 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1281 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1282 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1283 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1284 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1285 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1286 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1287 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1288 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1289 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1290 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1291 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1292 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1293 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1294 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1295 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1296 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1297 };
1298
1299 /**
1300 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1301 *
1302 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1303 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1304 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1305 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1306 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1307 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1308 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1309 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1310 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1311 */
1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1313 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1314 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1315 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1316 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1317 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1318 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1319 };
1320
1321 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1322
1323 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1324 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1325 RX_ENC_HT,
1326 RX_ENC_VHT,
1327 RX_ENC_HE,
1328 };
1329
1330 /**
1331 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1332 *
1333 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1334 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1335 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1336 *
1337 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1338 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1339 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1340 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1341 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1342 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1343 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1344 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1345 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1346 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1347 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1348 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1349 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1350 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1351 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1352 * values were filled.
1353 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1354 * support dB or unspecified units)
1355 * @antenna: antenna used
1356 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1357 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1358 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1359 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1360 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1361 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1362 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1363 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1364 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1365 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1366 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1367 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1368 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1369 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1370 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1371 */
1372 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1373 u64 mactime;
1374 u64 boottime_ns;
1375 u32 device_timestamp;
1376 u32 ampdu_reference;
1377 u32 flag;
1378 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1379 u8 enc_flags;
1380 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1381 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1382 u8 rate_idx;
1383 u8 nss;
1384 u8 rx_flags;
1385 u8 band;
1386 u8 antenna;
1387 s8 signal;
1388 u8 chains;
1389 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1390 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1391 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1392 };
1393
1394 static inline u32
1395 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1396 {
1397 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1398 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1399 }
1400
1401 /**
1402 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1403 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1404 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1405 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1406 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1407 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1408 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1409 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1410 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1411 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1412 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1413 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1414 * @data field.
1415 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1416 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1417 * length
1418 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1419 *
1420 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1421 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1422 * data.
1423 */
1424 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1425 u32 present;
1426 u8 align;
1427 u8 oui[3];
1428 u8 subns;
1429 u8 pad;
1430 u16 len;
1431 u8 data[];
1432 } __packed;
1433
1434 /**
1435 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1436 *
1437 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1438 *
1439 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1440 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1441 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1442 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1443 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1444 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1445 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1446 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1447 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1448 * for more.
1449 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1450 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1451 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1452 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1453 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1454 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1455 * operating channel.
1456 */
1457 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1458 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1459 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1460 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1461 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1462 };
1463
1464
1465 /**
1466 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1467 *
1468 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1469 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1470 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1471 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1472 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1473 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1474 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1475 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1476 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1477 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1478 */
1479 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1480 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1481 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1482 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1483 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1484 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1485 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1486 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1487 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1488 };
1489
1490 /**
1491 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1492 *
1493 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1494 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1495 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1496 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1497 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1498 */
1499 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1500 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1501 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1502 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1503 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1504
1505 /* keep last */
1506 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1507 };
1508
1509 /**
1510 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1511 *
1512 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1513 *
1514 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1515 *
1516 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1517 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1518 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1519 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1520 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1521 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1522 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1523 *
1524 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1525 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1526 *
1527 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1528 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1529 *
1530 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1531 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1532 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1533 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1534 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1535 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1536 *
1537 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1538 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1539 * configured for an HT channel.
1540 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1541 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1542 */
1543 struct ieee80211_conf {
1544 u32 flags;
1545 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1546
1547 u16 listen_interval;
1548 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1549
1550 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1551
1552 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1553 bool radar_enabled;
1554 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1555 };
1556
1557 /**
1558 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1559 *
1560 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1561 * operation.
1562 *
1563 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1564 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1565 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1566 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1567 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1568 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1569 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1570 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1571 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1572 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1573 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1574 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1575 * channel, expressed in TU.
1576 */
1577 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1578 u64 timestamp;
1579 u32 device_timestamp;
1580 bool block_tx;
1581 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1582 u8 count;
1583 u32 delay;
1584 };
1585
1586 /**
1587 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1588 *
1589 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1590 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1591 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1592 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1593 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1594 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1595 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1596 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1597 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1598 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1599 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1600 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1601 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1602 */
1603 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1604 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1605 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1606 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1607 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1608 };
1609
1610 /**
1611 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1612 *
1613 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1614 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1615 *
1616 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1617 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1618 * or the BSS we're associated to
1619 * @addr: address of this interface
1620 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1621 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1622 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1623 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1624 * for read access.
1625 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1626 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1627 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1628 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1629 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1630 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1631 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1632 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1633 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1634 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1635 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1636 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1637 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1638 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1639 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1640 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1641 * interface.
1642 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1643 * for this interface.
1644 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1645 * sizeof(void \*).
1646 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1647 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1648 * protected by fq->lock.
1649 */
1650 struct ieee80211_vif {
1651 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1652 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1653 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1654 bool p2p;
1655 bool csa_active;
1656 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1657
1658 u8 cab_queue;
1659 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1660
1661 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1662
1663 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1664
1665 u32 driver_flags;
1666
1667 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1668 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1669 #endif
1670
1671 bool probe_req_reg;
1672 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1673
1674 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1675
1676 /* must be last */
1677 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1678 };
1679
1680 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1681 {
1682 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1683 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1684 #endif
1685 return false;
1686 }
1687
1688 /**
1689 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1690 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1691 *
1692 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1693 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1694 *
1695 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1696 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1697 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1698 */
1699 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1700
1701 /**
1702 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1703 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1704 *
1705 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1706 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1707 *
1708 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1709 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1710 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1711 */
1712 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1713
1714 /**
1715 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1716 *
1717 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1718 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1719 *
1720 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1721 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1722 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1723 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1724 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1725 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1726 * generation in software.
1727 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1728 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1729 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1730 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1731 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1732 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1733 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1734 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1735 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1736 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1737 * MIC.
1738 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1739 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1740 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1741 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1742 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1743 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1744 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1745 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1746 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1747 * only for management frames (MFP).
1748 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1749 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1750 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1751 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1752 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1753 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1754 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1755 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1756 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1757 * generation only
1758 */
1759 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1760 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1761 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1762 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1763 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1764 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1765 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1766 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1767 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1768 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1769 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1770 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1771 };
1772
1773 /**
1774 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1775 *
1776 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1777 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1778 *
1779 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1780 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1781 * encrypted in hardware.
1782 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1783 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1784 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1785 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1786 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1787 * @keylen: key material length
1788 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1789 * data block:
1790 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1791 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1792 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1793 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1794 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1795 */
1796 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1797 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1798 u32 cipher;
1799 u8 icv_len;
1800 u8 iv_len;
1801 u8 hw_key_idx;
1802 s8 keyidx;
1803 u16 flags;
1804 u8 keylen;
1805 u8 key[];
1806 };
1807
1808 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1809
1810 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1811 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1812
1813 /**
1814 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1815 *
1816 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1817 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1818 * reverse order than in packet)
1819 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1820 * reverse order than in packet)
1821 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1822 * reverse order than in packet)
1823 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1824 * reverse order than in packet)
1825 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1826 */
1827 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1828 union {
1829 struct {
1830 u32 iv32;
1831 u16 iv16;
1832 } tkip;
1833 struct {
1834 u8 pn[6];
1835 } ccmp;
1836 struct {
1837 u8 pn[6];
1838 } aes_cmac;
1839 struct {
1840 u8 pn[6];
1841 } aes_gmac;
1842 struct {
1843 u8 pn[6];
1844 } gcmp;
1845 struct {
1846 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1847 u8 seq_len;
1848 } hw;
1849 };
1850 };
1851
1852 /**
1853 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1854 *
1855 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1856 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1857 *
1858 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1859 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1860 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1861 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1862 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1863 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1864 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1865 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1866 * key_idx value calculation:
1867 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1868 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1869 */
1870 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1871 u32 cipher;
1872 u16 iftype;
1873 u8 hdr_len;
1874 u8 pn_len;
1875 u8 pn_off;
1876 u8 key_idx_off;
1877 u8 key_idx_mask;
1878 u8 key_idx_shift;
1879 u8 mic_len;
1880 };
1881
1882 /**
1883 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1884 *
1885 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1886 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1887 *
1888 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1889 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1890 */
1891 enum set_key_cmd {
1892 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1893 };
1894
1895 /**
1896 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1897 *
1898 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1899 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1900 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1901 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1902 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1903 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1904 */
1905 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1906 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1907 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1908 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1909 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1910 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1911 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1912 };
1913
1914 /**
1915 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1916 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1917 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1918 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1919 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1920 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1921 *
1922 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1923 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1924 */
1925 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1926 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1927 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1928 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1929 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1930 };
1931
1932 /**
1933 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1934 *
1935 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1936 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1937 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1938 */
1939 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1940 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1941 struct {
1942 s8 idx;
1943 u8 count;
1944 u8 count_cts;
1945 u8 count_rts;
1946 u16 flags;
1947 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1948 };
1949
1950 /**
1951 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1952 *
1953 * Used to configure txpower for station.
1954 *
1955 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1956 * to the STA.
1957 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1958 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1959 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1960 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1961 * per peer TPC.
1962 */
1963 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1964 s16 power;
1965 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1966 };
1967
1968 /**
1969 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1970 *
1971 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1972 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1973 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1974 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1975 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1976 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1977 *
1978 * @addr: MAC address
1979 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1980 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1981 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1982 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1983 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1984 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
1985 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1986 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1987 * Can be modified by driver.
1988 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1989 * otherwise always false)
1990 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1991 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1992 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1993 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1994 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1995 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1996 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1997 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1998 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1999 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2000 * the station moves to associated state.
2001 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2002 * @rates: rate control selection table
2003 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2004 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2005 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2006 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2007 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2008 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2009 * unlimited.
2010 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2011 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2012 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2013 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2014 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2015 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2016 */
2017 struct ieee80211_sta {
2018 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2019 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2020 u16 aid;
2021 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2022 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2023 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2024 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2025 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2026 bool wme;
2027 u8 uapsd_queues;
2028 u8 max_sp;
2029 u8 rx_nss;
2030 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2031 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2032 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2033 bool tdls;
2034 bool tdls_initiator;
2035 bool mfp;
2036 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2037
2038 /**
2039 * @max_amsdu_len:
2040 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2041 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2042 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2043 *
2044 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2045 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2046 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2047 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2048 *
2049 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2050 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2051 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2052 */
2053 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2054 bool support_p2p_ps;
2055 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2056 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2057 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2058
2059 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2060
2061 /* must be last */
2062 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2063 };
2064
2065 /**
2066 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2067 *
2068 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2069 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2070 *
2071 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2072 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2073 */
2074 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2075 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2076 };
2077
2078 /**
2079 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2080 *
2081 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2082 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2083 */
2084 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2085 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2086 };
2087
2088 /**
2089 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2090 *
2091 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2092 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2093 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2094 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2095 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2096 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2097 *
2098 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2099 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2100 */
2101 struct ieee80211_txq {
2102 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2103 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2104 u8 tid;
2105 u8 ac;
2106
2107 /* must be last */
2108 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2109 };
2110
2111 /**
2112 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2113 *
2114 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2115 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2116 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2117 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2118 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2119 *
2120 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2121 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2122 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2123 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2124 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2125 * algorithm.
2126 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2127 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2128 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2129 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2130 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2131 * CCK frames.
2132 *
2133 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2134 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2135 * the FCS at the end.
2136 *
2137 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2138 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2139 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2140 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2141 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2142 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2143 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2144 *
2145 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2146 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2147 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2148 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2149 *
2150 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2151 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2152 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2153 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2154 *
2155 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2156 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2157 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2158 *
2159 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2160 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2161 *
2162 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2163 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2164 *
2165 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2166 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2167 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2168 *
2169 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2170 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2171 *
2172 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2173 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2174 *
2175 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2176 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2177 * the stack.
2178 *
2179 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2180 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2181 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2182 *
2183 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2184 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2185 * dtim_period).
2186 *
2187 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2188 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2189 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2190 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2191 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2192 * only in that case.
2193 *
2194 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2195 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2196 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2197 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2198 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2199 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2200 *
2201 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2202 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2203 * software.
2204 *
2205 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2206 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2207 * active interfaces.
2208 *
2209 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2210 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2211 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2212 *
2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2214 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2215 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2216 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2217 * supported cipher suites.
2218 *
2219 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2220 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2221 * for frames.
2222 *
2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2224 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2225 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2226 * control for more details.
2227 *
2228 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2229 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2230 *
2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2232 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2233 * is supported.
2234 *
2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2236 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2237 *
2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2239 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2240 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2241 *
2242 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2243 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2244 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2245 * CSA frame.
2246 *
2247 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2248 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2249 *
2250 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2251 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2254 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2255 *
2256 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2257 * within A-MPDU.
2258 *
2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2260 * for sent beacons.
2261 *
2262 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2263 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2264 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2265 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2266 *
2267 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2268 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2269 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2270 * timeout.
2271 *
2272 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2273 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2274 *
2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2276 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2277 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2278 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2279 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2280 *
2281 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2282 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2283 *
2284 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2285 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2286 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2287 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2290 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2291 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2292 *
2293 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2294 * TDLS links.
2295 *
2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2297 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2298 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2299 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2300 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2301 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2302 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2305 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2306 *
2307 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2308 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2309 *
2310 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2311 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2312 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2313 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2314 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2315 *
2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2317 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2318 * TXQs to start with.
2319 *
2320 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2321 * length in tx status information
2322 *
2323 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2324 *
2325 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2326 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2327 *
2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2329 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2330 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2331 *
2332 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2333 */
2334 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2335 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2336 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2337 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2338 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2339 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2340 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2341 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2342 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2343 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2344 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2345 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2346 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2347 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2348 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2349 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2350 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2351 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2352 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2353 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2354 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2355 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2356 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2357 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2358 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2359 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2360 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2361 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2362 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2363 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2364 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2365 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2366 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2367 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2368 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2369 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2370 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2371 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2372 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2373 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2374 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2375 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2376 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2377 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2378 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2379 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2380 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2381 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2382 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2383 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2384
2385 /* keep last, obviously */
2386 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2387 };
2388
2389 /**
2390 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2391 *
2392 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2393 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2394 *
2395 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2396 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2397 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2398 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2399 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2400 *
2401 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2402 *
2403 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2404 * along with this structure.
2405 *
2406 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2407 *
2408 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2409 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2410 *
2411 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2412 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2413 *
2414 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2415 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2416 *
2417 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2418 * that HW supports
2419 *
2420 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2421 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2422 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2423 *
2424 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2425 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2426 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2427 *
2428 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2429 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2430 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2431 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2432 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2433 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2434 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2435 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2436 *
2437 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2438 * can handle.
2439 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2440 * the hw can report back.
2441 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2442 *
2443 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2444 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2445 * aggregation.
2446 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2447 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2448 * it shouldn't be set.
2449 *
2450 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2451 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2452 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2453 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2454 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2455 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2456 *
2457 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2458 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2459 *
2460 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2461 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2462 *
2463 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2464 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2465 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2466 * adding _BW is supported today.
2467 *
2468 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2469 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2470 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2471 *
2472 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2473 *
2474 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2475 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2476 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2477 * device_timestamp.
2478 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2479 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2480 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2481 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2482 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2483 *
2484 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2485 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2486 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2487 *
2488 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2489 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2490 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2491 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2492 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2493 * neither enabled.
2494 *
2495 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2496 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2497 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2498 *
2499 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2500 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2501 * supported by HW.
2502 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2503 * device.
2504 *
2505 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2506 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2507 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2508 *
2509 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2510 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2511 *
2512 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2513 */
2514 struct ieee80211_hw {
2515 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2516 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2517 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2518 void *priv;
2519 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2520 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2521 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2522 int vif_data_size;
2523 int sta_data_size;
2524 int chanctx_data_size;
2525 int txq_data_size;
2526 u16 queues;
2527 u16 max_listen_interval;
2528 s8 max_signal;
2529 u8 max_rates;
2530 u8 max_report_rates;
2531 u8 max_rate_tries;
2532 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2533 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2534 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2535 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2536 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2537 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2538 struct {
2539 int units_pos;
2540 s16 accuracy;
2541 } radiotap_timestamp;
2542 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2543 u8 uapsd_queues;
2544 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2545 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2546 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2547 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2548 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2549 u8 weight_multiplier;
2550 u32 max_mtu;
2551 };
2552
2553 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2554 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2555 {
2556 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2557 }
2558 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2559
2560 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2561 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2562 {
2563 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2564 }
2565 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2566
2567 /**
2568 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2569 *
2570 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2571 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2572 */
2573 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2574 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2575
2576 /* Keep last */
2577 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2578 };
2579
2580 /**
2581 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2582 *
2583 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2584 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2585 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2586 * @status: channel-switch response status
2587 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2588 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2589 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2590 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2591 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2592 */
2593 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2594 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2595 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2596 u8 action_code;
2597 u32 status;
2598 u32 timestamp;
2599 u16 switch_time;
2600 u16 switch_timeout;
2601 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2602 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2603 };
2604
2605 /**
2606 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2607 *
2608 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2609 *
2610 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2611 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2612 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2613 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2614 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2615 *
2616 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2617 */
2618 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2619
2620 /**
2621 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2622 *
2623 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2624 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2625 */
2626 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2627 {
2628 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2629 }
2630
2631 /**
2632 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2633 *
2634 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2635 * @addr: the address to set
2636 */
2637 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2638 {
2639 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2640 }
2641
2642 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2643 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2644 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2645 {
2646 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2647 return NULL;
2648 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2649 }
2650
2651 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2652 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2653 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2654 {
2655 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2656 return NULL;
2657 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2658 }
2659
2660 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2661 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2662 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2663 {
2664 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2665 return NULL;
2666 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2667 }
2668
2669 /**
2670 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2671 * @hw: the hardware
2672 * @skb: the skb
2673 *
2674 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2675 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2676 */
2677 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2678
2679 /**
2680 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2681 *
2682 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2683 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2684 *
2685 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2686 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2687 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2688 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2689 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2690 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2691 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2692 *
2693 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2694 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2695 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2696 *
2697 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2698 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2699 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2700 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2701 *
2702 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2703 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2704 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2705 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2706 *
2707 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2708 *
2709 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2710 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2711 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2712 * based on the receive flags.
2713 *
2714 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2715 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2716 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2717 * keys.
2718 *
2719 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2720 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2721 * handler.
2722 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2723 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2724 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2725 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2726 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2727 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2728 *
2729 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2730 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2731 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2732 *
2733 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2734 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2735 * requirements:
2736 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2737 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2738 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2739 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2740 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2741 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2742 encrypted with the new key and
2743 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2744 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2745 */
2746
2747 /**
2748 * DOC: Powersave support
2749 *
2750 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2751 *
2752 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2753 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2754 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2755 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2756 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2757 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2758 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2759 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2760 *
2761 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2762 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2763 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2764 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2765 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2766 *
2767 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2768 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2769 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2770 *
2771 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2772 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2773 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2774 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2775 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2776 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2777 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2778 *
2779 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2780 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2781 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2782 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2783 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2784 * periods.
2785 *
2786 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2787 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2788 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2789 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2790 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2791 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2792 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2793 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2794 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2795 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2796 *
2797 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2798 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2799 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2800 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2801 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2802 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2803 *
2804 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2805 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2806 */
2807
2808 /**
2809 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2810 *
2811 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2812 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2813 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2814 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2815 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2816 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2817 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2818 *
2819 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2820 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2821 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2822 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2823 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2824 *
2825 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2826 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2827 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2828 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2829 *
2830 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2831 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2832 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2833 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2834 *
2835 * - a list of information element IDs
2836 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2837 *
2838 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2839 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2840 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2841 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2842 * vendor information elements.
2843 *
2844 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2845 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2846 *
2847 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2848 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2849 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2850 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2851 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2852 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2853 *
2854 *
2855 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2856 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2857 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2858 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2859 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2860 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2861 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2862 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2863 *
2864 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2865 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2866 * signal strength threshold checking.
2867 */
2868
2869 /**
2870 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2871 *
2872 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2873 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2874 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2875 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2876 *
2877 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2878 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2879 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2880 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2881 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2882 * hardware flags.
2883 *
2884 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2885 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2886 * turned off otherwise.
2887 *
2888 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2889 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2890 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2891 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2892 */
2893
2894 /**
2895 * DOC: Frame filtering
2896 *
2897 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2898 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2899 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2900 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2901 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2902 *
2903 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2904 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2905 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2906 *
2907 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2908 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2909 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2910 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2911 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2912 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2913 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2914 *
2915 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2916 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2917 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2918 * or dropped.
2919 *
2920 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2921 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2922 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2923 * the flag, but not clear it.
2924 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2925 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2926 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2927 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2928 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2929 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2930 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2931 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2932 */
2933
2934 /**
2935 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2936 *
2937 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2938 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2939 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2940 *
2941 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2942 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2943 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2944 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2945 * the driver code.
2946 *
2947 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2948 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2949 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2950 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2951 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2952 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2953 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2954 *
2955 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2956 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2957 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2958 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2959 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2960 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2961 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2962 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2963 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2964 * @sta_notify callback.
2965 *
2966 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2967 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2968 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2969 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2970 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2971 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2972 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2973 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2974 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2975 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2976 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2977 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2978 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2979 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2980 *
2981 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2982 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2983 *
2984 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2985 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2986 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2987 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2988 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2989 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2990 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2991 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2992 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2993 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2994 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2995 *
2996 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2997 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2998 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2999 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3000 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3001 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3002 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3003 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3004 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3005 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3006 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3007 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3008 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3009 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3010 *
3011 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3012 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3013 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3014 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3015 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3016 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3017 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3018 *
3019 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3020 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3021 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3022 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3023 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3024 *
3025 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3026 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3027 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3028 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3029 */
3030
3031 /**
3032 * DOC: HW queue control
3033 *
3034 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3035 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3036 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3037 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3038 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3039 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3040 *
3041 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3042 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3043 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3044 *
3045 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3046 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3047 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3048 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3049 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3050 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3051 * the hardware queue.
3052 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3053 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3054 *
3055 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3056 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3057 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3058 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3059 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3060 *
3061 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3062 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3063 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3064 * off-channel queue: 9
3065 *
3066 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3067 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3068 *
3069 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3070 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3071 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3072 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3073 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3074 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3075 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3076 *
3077 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3078 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3079 *
3080 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3081 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3082 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3083 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3084 */
3085
3086 /**
3087 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3088 *
3089 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3090 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3091 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3092 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3093 *
3094 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3095 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3096 * multicast address.
3097 *
3098 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3099 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3100 *
3101 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3102 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3103 *
3104 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3105 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3106 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3107 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3108 * honour this flag if possible.
3109 *
3110 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3111 * station
3112 *
3113 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3114 *
3115 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3116 *
3117 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3118 *
3119 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3120 */
3121 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3122 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3123 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3124 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3125 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3126 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3127 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3128 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3129 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3130 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3131 };
3132
3133 /**
3134 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3135 *
3136 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3137 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3138 *
3139 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3140 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3141 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3142 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3143 *
3144 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3145 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3146 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3147 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3148 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3149 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3150 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3151 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3152 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3153 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3154 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3155 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3156 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3157 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3158 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3159 * session is gone and removes the station.
3160 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3161 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3162 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3163 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3164 */
3165 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3166 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3167 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3168 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3169 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3170 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3171 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3172 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3173 };
3174
3175 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3176 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3177
3178 /**
3179 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3180 *
3181 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3182 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3183 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3184 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3185 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3186 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3187 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3188 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3189 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3190 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3191 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3192 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3193 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3194 */
3195 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3196 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3197 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3198 u16 tid;
3199 u16 ssn;
3200 u16 buf_size;
3201 bool amsdu;
3202 u16 timeout;
3203 };
3204
3205 /**
3206 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3207 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3208 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3209 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3210 */
3211 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3212 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3213 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3214 };
3215
3216 /**
3217 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3218 *
3219 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3220 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3221 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3222 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3223 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3224 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3225 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3226 * the peer.
3227 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3228 * by the peer
3229 */
3230 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3231 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3232 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3233 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3234 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3235 };
3236
3237 /**
3238 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3239 *
3240 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3241 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3242 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3243 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3244 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3245 *
3246 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3247 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3248 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3249 */
3250 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3251 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3252 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3253 };
3254
3255 /**
3256 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3257 *
3258 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3259 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3260 *
3261 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3262 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3263 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3264 * of wowlan configuration)
3265 */
3266 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3267 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3268 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3269 };
3270
3271 /**
3272 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3273 *
3274 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3275 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3276 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3277 *
3278 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3279 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3280 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3281 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3282 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3283 * Must be atomic.
3284 *
3285 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3286 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3287 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3288 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3289 * or zero.
3290 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3291 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3292 * is added.
3293 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3294 *
3295 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3296 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3297 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3298 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3299 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3300 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3301 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3302 *
3303 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3304 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3305 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3306 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3307 * reconfigured at resume time.
3308 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3309 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3310 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3311 * must return 1 from this function.
3312 *
3313 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3314 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3315 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3316 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3317 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3318 *
3319 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3320 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3321 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3322 * in suspend().
3323 *
3324 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3325 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3326 * and @stop must be implemented.
3327 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3328 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3329 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3330 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3331 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3332 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3333 *
3334 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3335 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3336 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3337 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3338 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3339 *
3340 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3341 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3342 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3343 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3344 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3345 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3346 * MAC address of the device going away.
3347 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3348 *
3349 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3350 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3351 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3352 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3353 *
3354 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3355 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3356 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3357 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3358 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3359 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3360 * can sleep.
3361 *
3362 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3363 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3364 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3365 *
3366 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3367 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3368 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3369 *
3370 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3371 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3372 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3373 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3374 * which flags are changed.
3375 * This callback can sleep.
3376 *
3377 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3378 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3379 *
3380 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3381 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3382 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3383 * is enabled.
3384 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3385 * The callback can sleep.
3386 *
3387 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3388 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3389 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3390 * The callback must be atomic.
3391 *
3392 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3393 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3394 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3395 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3396 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3397 *
3398 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3399 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3400 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3401 *
3402 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3403 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3404 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3405 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3406 * that power save is disabled.
3407 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3408 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3409 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3410 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3411 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3412 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3413 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3414 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3415 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3416 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3417 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3418 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3419 * The callback can sleep.
3420 *
3421 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3422 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3423 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3424 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3425 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3426 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3427 * The callback can sleep.
3428 *
3429 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3430 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3431 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3432 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3433 *
3434 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3435 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3436 *
3437 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3438 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3439 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3440 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3441 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3442 *
3443 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3444 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3445 * this notification.
3446 * The callback can sleep.
3447 *
3448 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3449 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3450 * The callback can sleep.
3451 *
3452 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3453 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3454 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3455 * The callback must be atomic.
3456 *
3457 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3458 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3459 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3460 * should be set as well.
3461 * The callback can sleep.
3462 *
3463 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3464 * The callback can sleep.
3465 *
3466 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3467 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3468 *
3469 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3470 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3471 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3472 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3473 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3474 * This callback can sleep.
3475 *
3476 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3477 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3478 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3479 * callback can sleep.
3480 *
3481 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3482 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3483 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3484 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3485 *
3486 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3487 * power for the station.
3488 * This callback can sleep.
3489 *
3490 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3491 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3492 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3493 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3494 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3495 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3496 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3497 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3498 * The callback can sleep.
3499 *
3500 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3501 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3502 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3503 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3504 * in @sta_state.
3505 * The callback can sleep.
3506 *
3507 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3508 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3509 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3510 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3511 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3512 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3513 * Must be atomic.
3514 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3515 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3516 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3517 *
3518 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3519 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3520 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3521 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3522 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3523 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3524 * The callback can sleep.
3525 *
3526 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3527 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3528 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3529 * The callback can sleep.
3530 *
3531 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3532 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3533 * required function.
3534 * The callback can sleep.
3535 *
3536 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3537 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3538 * required function.
3539 * The callback can sleep.
3540 *
3541 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3542 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3543 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3544 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3545 * The callback can sleep.
3546 *
3547 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3548 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3549 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3550 * TSF synchronization.
3551 * The callback can sleep.
3552 *
3553 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3554 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3555 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3556 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3557 * The callback can sleep.
3558 *
3559 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3560 *
3561 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3562 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3563 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3564 * The callback can sleep.
3565 *
3566 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3567 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3568 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3569 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3570 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3571 *
3572 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3573 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3574 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3575 *
3576 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3577 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3578 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3579 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3580 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3581 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3582 * The callback can sleep.
3583 *
3584 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3585 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3586 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3587 * completion of the channel switch.
3588 *
3589 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3590 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3591 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3592 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3593 *
3594 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3595 *
3596 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3597 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3598 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3599 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3600 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3601 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3602 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3603 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3604 * must be accepted in this case.
3605 * This callback may sleep.
3606 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3607 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3608 *
3609 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3610 *
3611 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3612 *
3613 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3614 * queues before entering power save.
3615 *
3616 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3617 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3618 * The callback can sleep.
3619 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3620 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3621 * The callback must be atomic.
3622 *
3623 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3624 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3625 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3626 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3627 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3628 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3629 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3630 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3631 * more-data bit must always be set.
3632 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3633 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3634 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3635 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3636 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3637 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3638 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3639 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3640 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3641 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3642 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3643 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3644 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3645 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3646 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3647 * This callback must be atomic.
3648 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3649 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3650 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3651 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3652 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3653 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3654 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3655 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3656 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3657 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3658 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3659 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3660 * This callback must be atomic.
3661 *
3662 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3663 *
3664 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3665 *
3666 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3667 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3668 *
3669 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3670 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3671 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3672 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3673 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3674 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3675 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3676 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3677 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3678 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3679 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3680 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3681 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3682 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3683 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3684 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3685 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3686 *
3687 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3688 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3689 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3690 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3691 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3692 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3693 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3694 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3695 *
3696 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3697 * This callback may sleep.
3698 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3699 * This callback may sleep.
3700 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3701 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3702 * channel context with different settings
3703 * This callback may sleep.
3704 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3705 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3706 * This callback may sleep.
3707 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3708 * unbound from vif.
3709 * This callback may sleep.
3710 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3711 * another, as specified in the list of
3712 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3713 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3714 * This callback may sleep.
3715 *
3716 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3717 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3718 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3719 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3720 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3721 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3722 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3723 *
3724 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3725 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3726 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3727 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3728 * This callback may sleep.
3729 *
3730 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3731 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3732 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3733 *
3734 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3735 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3736 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3737 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3738 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3739 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3740 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3741 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3742 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3743 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3744 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3745 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3746 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3747 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3748 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3749 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3750 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3751 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3752 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3753 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3754 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3755 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3756 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3757 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3758 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3759 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3760 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3761 *
3762 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3763 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3764 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3765 *
3766 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3767 * and hardware limits.
3768 *
3769 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3770 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3771 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3772 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3773 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3774 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3775 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3776 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3777 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3778 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3779 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3780 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3781 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3782 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3783 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3784 * the function call.
3785 *
3786 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3787 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3788 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3789 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3790 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3791 *
3792 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3793 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3794 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3795 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3796 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3797 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3798 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3799 * changed parameters.
3800 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3801 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3802 * this call.
3803 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3804 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3805 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3806 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3807 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3808 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3809 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3810 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3811 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3812 *
3813 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3814 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3815 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3816 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3817 * This callback may sleep.
3818 */
3819 struct ieee80211_ops {
3820 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3821 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3822 struct sk_buff *skb);
3823 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3824 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3825 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3826 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3827 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3828 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3829 #endif
3830 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3832 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3833 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3834 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3835 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3837 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3838 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3840 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3841 u32 changed);
3842
3843 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3844 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3845
3846 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3847 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3848 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 unsigned int changed_flags,
3850 unsigned int *total_flags,
3851 u64 multicast);
3852 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3854 unsigned int filter_flags,
3855 unsigned int changed_flags);
3856 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3857 bool set);
3858 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3859 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3860 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3861 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3862 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3863 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3864 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3865 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3866 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3867 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3869 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3870 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3871 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3872 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3873 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3874 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3875 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3876 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3877 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3878 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3879 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3880 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3881 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3883 const u8 *mac_addr);
3884 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3886 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3887 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3888 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3889 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3890 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3891 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3892 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3893 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3894 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3895 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3896 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3897 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3898 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3899 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3901 struct dentry *dir);
3902 #endif
3903 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3904 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3905 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3906 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3907 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3908 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3909 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3910 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3911 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3912 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3913 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3914 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3915 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3916 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3918 u32 changed);
3919 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3920 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3921 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3922 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3923 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3924 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3925 struct station_info *sinfo);
3926 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3928 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3929 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3930 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3931 u64 tsf);
3932 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3933 s64 offset);
3934 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3935 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3936
3937 /**
3938 * @ampdu_action:
3939 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3940 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3941 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3942 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3943 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3944 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3945 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3946 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3947 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3948 *
3949 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3950 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3951 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3952 *
3953 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3954 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3955 *
3956 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3957 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3958 * - ``TX: 81``
3959 *
3960 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3961 *
3962 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3963 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3964 * if the session can start immediately.
3965 *
3966 * The callback can sleep.
3967 */
3968 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3971 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3972 struct survey_info *survey);
3973 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3974 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3975 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3976 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977 void *data, int len);
3978 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3979 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3980 void *data, int len);
3981 #endif
3982 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 u32 queues, bool drop);
3984 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3985 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3986 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3987 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3988 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3989
3990 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3991 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3993 int duration,
3994 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3995 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3997 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3998 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4000 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4001 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4002 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4003 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4005 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4006
4007 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4008 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4009 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4010 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4011 bool more_data);
4012 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4013 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4014 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4015 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4016 bool more_data);
4017
4018 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4020 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4021 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4022 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4023 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4024 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4025 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4026
4027 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4028 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4029 u16 duration);
4030
4031 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4032 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4033
4034 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4035 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4036 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4038 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4039 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4040 u32 changed);
4041 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4042 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4043 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4044 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4046 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4047 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4048 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4049 int n_vifs,
4050 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4051
4052 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4053 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4054
4055 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4056 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4059 #endif
4060 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4061 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4062 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4063 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4065 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4066
4067 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4069 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4070 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4071 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4072 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4073 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4074
4075 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4076 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4077 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4078 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4079 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4080 int *dbm);
4081
4082 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4083 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4085 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4086 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4087 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4088 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4089 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4090 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4091 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4092 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4093
4094 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4095 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4096 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4097
4098 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4099 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4100 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4101 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4102 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4103 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4104 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4105 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4106 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4108 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4109 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4110 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4111 u8 instance_id);
4112 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4113 struct sk_buff *head,
4114 struct sk_buff *skb);
4115 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4116 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4117 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4118 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4119 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4120 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4121 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4122 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4124 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4125 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4126 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4128 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4129 };
4130
4131 /**
4132 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4133 *
4134 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4135 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4136 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4137 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4138 * @priv_data_len.
4139 *
4140 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4141 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4142 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4143 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4144 *
4145 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4146 */
4147 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4148 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4149 const char *requested_name);
4150
4151 /**
4152 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4153 *
4154 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4155 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4156 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4157 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4158 * @priv_data_len.
4159 *
4160 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4161 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4162 *
4163 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4164 */
4165 static inline
4166 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4167 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4168 {
4169 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4170 }
4171
4172 /**
4173 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4174 *
4175 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4176 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4177 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4178 *
4179 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4180 *
4181 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4182 */
4183 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4184
4185 /**
4186 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4187 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4188 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4189 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4190 */
4191 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4192 int throughput;
4193 int blink_time;
4194 };
4195
4196 /**
4197 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4198 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4199 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4200 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4201 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4202 */
4203 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4204 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4205 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4206 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4207 };
4208
4209 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4210 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4211 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4212 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4213 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4214 const char *
4215 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4216 unsigned int flags,
4217 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4218 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4219 #endif
4220 /**
4221 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4222 *
4223 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4224 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4225 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4226 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4227 *
4228 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4229 *
4230 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4231 */
4232 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4233 {
4234 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4235 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4236 #else
4237 return NULL;
4238 #endif
4239 }
4240
4241 /**
4242 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4243 *
4244 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4245 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4246 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4247 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4248 *
4249 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4250 *
4251 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4252 */
4253 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4254 {
4255 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4256 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4257 #else
4258 return NULL;
4259 #endif
4260 }
4261
4262 /**
4263 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4264 *
4265 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4266 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4267 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4268 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4269 *
4270 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4271 *
4272 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4273 */
4274 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4275 {
4276 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4277 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4278 #else
4279 return NULL;
4280 #endif
4281 }
4282
4283 /**
4284 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4285 *
4286 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4287 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4288 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4289 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4290 *
4291 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4292 *
4293 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4294 */
4295 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4296 {
4297 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4298 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4299 #else
4300 return NULL;
4301 #endif
4302 }
4303
4304 /**
4305 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4306 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4307 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4308 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4309 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4310 *
4311 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4312 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4313 *
4314 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4315 */
4316 static inline const char *
4317 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4318 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4319 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4320 {
4321 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4322 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4323 blink_table_len);
4324 #else
4325 return NULL;
4326 #endif
4327 }
4328
4329 /**
4330 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4331 *
4332 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4333 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4334 *
4335 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4336 */
4337 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4338
4339 /**
4340 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4341 *
4342 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4343 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4344 * before calling this function.
4345 *
4346 * @hw: the hardware to free
4347 */
4348 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4349
4350 /**
4351 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4352 *
4353 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4354 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4355 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4356 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4357 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4358 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4359 *
4360 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4361 */
4362 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4363
4364 /**
4365 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4366 *
4367 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4368 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4369 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4370 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4371 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4372 *
4373 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4374 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4375 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4376 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4377 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4378 *
4379 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4380 *
4381 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4382 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4383 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4384 * @napi: the NAPI context
4385 */
4386 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4387 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4388
4389 /**
4390 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4391 *
4392 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4393 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4394 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4395 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4396 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4397 *
4398 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4399 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4400 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4401 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4402 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4403 *
4404 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4405 *
4406 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4407 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4408 */
4409 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4410 {
4411 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4412 }
4413
4414 /**
4415 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4416 *
4417 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4418 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4419 *
4420 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4421 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4422 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4423 *
4424 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4425 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4426 */
4427 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4428
4429 /**
4430 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4431 *
4432 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4433 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4434 *
4435 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4436 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4437 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4438 *
4439 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4440 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4441 */
4442 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4443 struct sk_buff *skb)
4444 {
4445 local_bh_disable();
4446 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4447 local_bh_enable();
4448 }
4449
4450 /**
4451 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4452 *
4453 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4454 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4455 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4456 *
4457 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4458 *
4459 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4460 * each other.
4461 *
4462 * @sta: currently connected sta
4463 * @start: start or stop PS
4464 *
4465 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4466 */
4467 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4468
4469 /**
4470 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4471 * (in process context)
4472 *
4473 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4474 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4475 * applies.
4476 *
4477 * @sta: currently connected sta
4478 * @start: start or stop PS
4479 *
4480 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4481 */
4482 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4483 bool start)
4484 {
4485 int ret;
4486
4487 local_bh_disable();
4488 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4489 local_bh_enable();
4490
4491 return ret;
4492 }
4493
4494 /**
4495 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4496 * @sta: currently connected station
4497 *
4498 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4499 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4500 * connected station was received.
4501 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4502 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4503 * be serialized.
4504 */
4505 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4506
4507 /**
4508 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4509 * @sta: currently connected station
4510 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4511 *
4512 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4513 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4514 * from a connected station was received.
4515 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4516 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4517 * serialized.
4518 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4519 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4520 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4521 * checks.
4522 */
4523 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4524
4525 /*
4526 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4527 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4528 */
4529 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4530
4531 /**
4532 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4533 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4534 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4535 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4536 *
4537 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4538 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4539 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4540 *
4541 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4542 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4543 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4544 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4545 *
4546 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4547 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4548 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4549 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4550 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4551 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4552 *
4553 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4554 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4555 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4556 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4557 * use this API.
4558 */
4559 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4560 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4561
4562 /**
4563 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4564 *
4565 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4566 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4567 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4568 *
4569 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4570 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4571 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4572 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4573 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4574 */
4575 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4576 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4577 struct sk_buff *skb,
4578 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4579 int max_rates);
4580
4581 /**
4582 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4583 *
4584 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4585 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4586 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4587 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4588 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4589 * slow stations to starve).
4590 *
4591 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4592 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4593 */
4594 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4595 u32 thr);
4596
4597 /**
4598 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4599 *
4600 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4601 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4602 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4603 *
4604 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4605 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4606 * @info: tx status information
4607 */
4608 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4609 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4610 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4611
4612 /**
4613 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4614 *
4615 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4616 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4617 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4618 *
4619 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4620 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4621 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4622 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4623 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4624 *
4625 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4626 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4627 */
4628 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4629 struct sk_buff *skb);
4630
4631 /**
4632 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4633 *
4634 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4635 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4636 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4637 *
4638 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4639 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4640 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4641 *
4642 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4643 * @status: tx status information
4644 */
4645 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4646 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4647
4648 /**
4649 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4650 *
4651 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4652 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4653 * specific skbs.
4654 *
4655 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4656 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4657 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4658 *
4659 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4660 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4661 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4662 * @info: tx status information
4663 */
4664 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4665 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4666 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4667 {
4668 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4669 .sta = sta,
4670 .info = info,
4671 };
4672
4673 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4674 }
4675
4676 /**
4677 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4678 *
4679 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4680 *
4681 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4682 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4683 * for a single hardware.
4684 *
4685 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4686 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4687 */
4688 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4689 struct sk_buff *skb)
4690 {
4691 local_bh_disable();
4692 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4693 local_bh_enable();
4694 }
4695
4696 /**
4697 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4698 *
4699 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4700 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4701 *
4702 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4703 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4704 *
4705 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4706 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4707 */
4708 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4709 struct sk_buff *skb);
4710
4711 /**
4712 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4713 *
4714 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4715 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4716 * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4717 * 802.11 frames.
4718 *
4719 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4720 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4721 * calls in the same tx status family.
4722 *
4723 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4724 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4725 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4726 */
4727 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4729 struct sk_buff *skb);
4730
4731 /**
4732 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4733 *
4734 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4735 * connected STA.
4736 *
4737 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4738 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4739 */
4740 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4741
4742 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4743
4744 /**
4745 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4746 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4747 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4748 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4749 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4750 * should be ignored.
4751 * @mbssid_offset: position of mbssid_offset
4752 * @mbssid_length: position of mbssid_offset
4753 */
4754 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4755 u16 tim_offset;
4756 u16 tim_length;
4757
4758 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4759
4760 u16 multiple_bssid_offset;
4761 u16 multiple_bssid_length;
4762 };
4763
4764 /**
4765 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4766 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4767 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4768 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4769 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4770 *
4771 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4772 * obtain the beacon template.
4773 *
4774 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4775 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4776 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4777 * applicable, the CSA count.
4778 *
4779 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4780 *
4781 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4782 */
4783 struct sk_buff *
4784 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4785 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4786 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4787
4788 /**
4789 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4790 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4791 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4792 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4793 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4794 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4795 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4796 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4797 *
4798 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4799 * obtain the beacon frame.
4800 *
4801 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4802 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4803 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4804 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4805 *
4806 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4807 *
4808 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4809 */
4810 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4811 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4812 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4813
4814 /**
4815 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4816 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4818 *
4819 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4820 *
4821 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4822 */
4823 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4824 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4825 {
4826 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4827 }
4828
4829 /**
4830 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4831 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4832 *
4833 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4834 * This function is called implicitly when
4835 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4836 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4837 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4838 *
4839 * Return: new csa counter value
4840 */
4841 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4842
4843 /**
4844 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4845 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4846 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4847 *
4848 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4849 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4850 *
4851 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4852 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4853 */
4854 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4855
4856 /**
4857 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4858 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4859 *
4860 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4861 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4862 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4863 */
4864 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4865
4866 /**
4867 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4868 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4869 *
4870 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4871 */
4872 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4873
4874
4875 /**
4876 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4877 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4878 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4879 *
4880 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4881 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4882 *
4883 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4884 *
4885 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4886 */
4887 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4888 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4889
4890 /**
4891 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4892 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4893 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4894 *
4895 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4896 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4897 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4898 *
4899 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4900 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4901 *
4902 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4903 */
4904 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4905 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4906
4907 /**
4908 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4909 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4910 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4911 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4912 * if at all possible
4913 *
4914 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4915 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4916 * BSSID and address is used.
4917 *
4918 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4919 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4920 *
4921 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4922 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4923 *
4924 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4925 */
4926 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4927 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4928 bool qos_ok);
4929
4930 /**
4931 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4932 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4933 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4934 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4935 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4936 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4937 *
4938 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4939 * hardware.
4940 *
4941 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4942 */
4943 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4944 const u8 *src_addr,
4945 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4946 size_t tailroom);
4947
4948 /**
4949 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4950 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4952 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4953 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4954 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4955 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4956 *
4957 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4958 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4959 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4960 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4961 */
4962 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4963 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4964 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4965 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4966
4967 /**
4968 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4969 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4970 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4971 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4972 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4973 *
4974 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4975 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4976 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4977 *
4978 * Return: The duration.
4979 */
4980 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4981 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4982 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4983
4984 /**
4985 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4986 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4987 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4988 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4989 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4990 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4991 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4992 *
4993 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4994 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4995 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4996 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4997 */
4998 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5000 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5001 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5002 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5003
5004 /**
5005 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5006 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5007 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5008 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5009 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5010 *
5011 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5012 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5013 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5014 *
5015 * Return: The duration.
5016 */
5017 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5018 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5019 size_t frame_len,
5020 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5021
5022 /**
5023 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5024 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5025 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5026 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5027 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5028 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5029 *
5030 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5031 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5032 *
5033 * Return: The duration.
5034 */
5035 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5036 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5037 enum nl80211_band band,
5038 size_t frame_len,
5039 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5040
5041 /**
5042 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5043 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5044 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5045 *
5046 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5047 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5048 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5049 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5050 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5051 *
5052 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5053 * frames are available.
5054 *
5055 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5056 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5057 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5058 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5059 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5060 * use common code for all beacons.
5061 */
5062 struct sk_buff *
5063 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5064
5065 /**
5066 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5067 *
5068 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5069 *
5070 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5071 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5072 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5073 */
5074 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5075 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5076
5077 /**
5078 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5079 *
5080 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5081 * from the given packet.
5082 *
5083 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5084 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5085 * with this P1K
5086 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5087 */
5088 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5089 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5090 {
5091 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5092 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5093 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5094
5095 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5096 }
5097
5098 /**
5099 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5100 *
5101 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5102 * and transmitter address.
5103 *
5104 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5105 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5106 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5107 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5108 */
5109 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5110 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5111
5112 /**
5113 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5114 *
5115 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5116 * in the packet.
5117 *
5118 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5119 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5120 * encrypted with this key
5121 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5122 */
5123 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5124 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5125
5126 /**
5127 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5128 *
5129 * @pos: start of crypto header
5130 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5131 * @pn: PN to add
5132 *
5133 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5134 * the packet payload)
5135 *
5136 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5137 * point to the crypto header)
5138 */
5139 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5140
5141 /**
5142 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5143 *
5144 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5145 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5146 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5147 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5148 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5149 *
5150 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5151 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5152 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5153 *
5154 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5155 * can be done concurrently.
5156 */
5157 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5158 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5159
5160 /**
5161 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5162 *
5163 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5164 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5165 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5166 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5167 * @seq: new sequence data
5168 *
5169 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5170 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5171 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5172 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5173 *
5174 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5175 * can be done concurrently.
5176 */
5177 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5178 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5179
5180 /**
5181 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5182 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5183 *
5184 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5185 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5186 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5187 *
5188 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5189 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5190 */
5191 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5192
5193 /**
5194 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5195 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5196 * @keyconf: new key data
5197 *
5198 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5199 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5200 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5201 *
5202 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5203 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5204 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5205 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5206 *
5207 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5208 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5209 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5210 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5211 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5212 * of the reconfiguration.
5213 *
5214 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5215 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5216 *
5217 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5218 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5219 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5220 * the key that's being replaced.
5221 */
5222 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5223 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5224 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5225
5226 /**
5227 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5228 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5229 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5230 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5231 * @gfp: allocation flags
5232 */
5233 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5234 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5235
5236 /**
5237 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5238 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5239 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5240 *
5241 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5242 */
5243 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5244
5245 /**
5246 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5247 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5248 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5249 *
5250 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5251 */
5252 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5253
5254 /**
5255 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5256 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5257 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5258 *
5259 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5260 *
5261 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5262 */
5263
5264 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5265
5266 /**
5267 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5268 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5269 *
5270 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5271 */
5272 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5273
5274 /**
5275 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5276 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5277 *
5278 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5279 */
5280 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5281
5282 /**
5283 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5284 *
5285 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5286 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5287 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5288 * any context, including hardirq context.
5289 *
5290 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5291 * @info: information about the completed scan
5292 */
5293 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5294 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5295
5296 /**
5297 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5298 *
5299 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5300 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5301 *
5302 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5303 */
5304 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5305
5306 /**
5307 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5308 *
5309 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5310 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5311 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5312 * while associating, for instance.
5313 *
5314 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5315 */
5316 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5317
5318 /**
5319 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5320 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5321 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5322 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5323 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5324 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5325 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5326 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5327 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5328 */
5329 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5330 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5331 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5332 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5333 };
5334
5335 /**
5336 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5337 *
5338 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5339 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5340 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5341 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5342 *
5343 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5344 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5345 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5346 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5347 */
5348 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5349 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5350 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5351 void *data);
5352
5353 /**
5354 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5355 *
5356 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5357 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5358 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5359 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5360 * be used.
5361 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5362 *
5363 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5364 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5365 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5366 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5367 */
5368 static inline void
5369 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5370 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5371 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5372 void *data)
5373 {
5374 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5375 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5376 iterator, data);
5377 }
5378
5379 /**
5380 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5381 *
5382 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5383 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5384 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5385 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5386 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5387 *
5388 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5389 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5390 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5391 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5392 */
5393 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5394 u32 iter_flags,
5395 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5396 u8 *mac,
5397 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5398 void *data);
5399
5400 /**
5401 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5402 *
5403 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5404 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5405 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5406 *
5407 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5408 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5409 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5410 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5411 */
5412 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5413 u32 iter_flags,
5414 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5415 u8 *mac,
5416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5417 void *data);
5418
5419 /**
5420 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5421 *
5422 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5423 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5424 * function for them.
5425 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5426 *
5427 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5428 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5429 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5430 */
5431 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5432 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5433 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5434 void *data);
5435 /**
5436 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5437 *
5438 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5439 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5440 *
5441 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5442 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5443 */
5444 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5445
5446 /**
5447 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5448 *
5449 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5450 * workqueue.
5451 *
5452 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5453 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5454 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5455 */
5456 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5457 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5458 unsigned long delay);
5459
5460 /**
5461 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5462 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5463 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5464 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5465 *
5466 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5467 *
5468 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5469 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5470 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5471 */
5472 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5473 u16 timeout);
5474
5475 /**
5476 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5478 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5479 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5480 *
5481 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5482 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5483 * from any context.
5484 */
5485 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5486 u16 tid);
5487
5488 /**
5489 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5490 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5491 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5492 *
5493 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5494 *
5495 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5496 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5497 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5498 */
5499 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5500
5501 /**
5502 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5503 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5504 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5505 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5506 *
5507 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5508 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5509 * can be called from any context.
5510 */
5511 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5512 u16 tid);
5513
5514 /**
5515 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5516 *
5517 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5518 * @addr: station's address
5519 *
5520 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5521 *
5522 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5523 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5524 */
5525 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5526 const u8 *addr);
5527
5528 /**
5529 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5530 *
5531 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5532 * @addr: remote station's address
5533 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5534 *
5535 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5536 *
5537 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5538 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5539 *
5540 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5541 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5542 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5543 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5544 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5545 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5546 * is not reliable.
5547 *
5548 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5549 */
5550 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5551 const u8 *addr,
5552 const u8 *localaddr);
5553
5554 /**
5555 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5556 * @hw: the hardware
5557 * @pubsta: the station
5558 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5559 *
5560 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5561 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5562 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5563 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5564 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5565 *
5566 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5567 * manner.
5568 *
5569 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5570 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5571 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5572 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5573 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5574 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5575 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5576 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5577 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5578 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5579 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5580 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5581 * woke up while blocked or not.
5582 */
5583 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5584 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5585
5586 /**
5587 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5588 * @pubsta: the station
5589 *
5590 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5591 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5592 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5593 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5594 *
5595 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5596 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5597 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5598 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5599 *
5600 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5601 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5602 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5603 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5604 */
5605 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5606
5607 /**
5608 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5609 * @pubsta: the station
5610 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5611 *
5612 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5613 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5614 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5615 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5616 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5617 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5618 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5619 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5620 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5621 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5622 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5623 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5624 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5625 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5626 */
5627 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5628
5629 /**
5630 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5631 *
5632 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5633 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5634 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5635 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5636 *
5637 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5638 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5639 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5640 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5641 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5642 * attempts.
5643 *
5644 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5645 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5646 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5647 * them to 0.
5648 *
5649 * @pubsta: the station
5650 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5651 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5652 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5653 */
5654 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5655 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5656
5657 /**
5658 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5659 *
5660 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5661 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5662 *
5663 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5664 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5665 */
5666 bool
5667 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5668
5669 /**
5670 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5671 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5672 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5673 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5674 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5675 *
5676 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5677 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5678 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5679 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5680 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5681 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5682 *
5683 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5684 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5685 * set_key callback.
5686 */
5687 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5688 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5689 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5691 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5692 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5693 void *data),
5694 void *iter_data);
5695
5696 /**
5697 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5698 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5699 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5700 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5701 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5702 *
5703 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5704 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5705 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5706 * in removal process will be skipped.
5707 *
5708 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5709 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5710 */
5711 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5712 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5713 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5715 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5716 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5717 void *data),
5718 void *iter_data);
5719
5720 /**
5721 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5722 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5723 * @iter: iterator function
5724 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5725 *
5726 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5727 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5728 * places while calling into the driver.
5729 *
5730 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5731 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5732 * removed.
5733 *
5734 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5735 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5736 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5737 * or not.
5738 */
5739 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5740 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5741 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5742 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5743 void *data),
5744 void *iter_data);
5745
5746 /**
5747 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5748 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5749 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5750 *
5751 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5752 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5753 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5754 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5755 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5756 * %NULL.
5757 *
5758 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5759 */
5760 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5762
5763 /**
5764 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5765 *
5766 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5767 *
5768 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5769 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5770 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5771 */
5772 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5773
5774 /**
5775 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5776 *
5777 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5778 *
5779 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5780 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5781 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5782 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5783 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5784 *
5785 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5786 * without connection recovery attempts.
5787 */
5788 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5789
5790 /**
5791 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5792 *
5793 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5794 *
5795 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5796 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5797 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5798 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5799 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5800 *
5801 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5802 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5803 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5804 * disconnect normally later.
5805 *
5806 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5807 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5808 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5809 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5810 */
5811 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5812
5813 /**
5814 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5815 * rssi threshold triggered
5816 *
5817 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5818 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5819 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5820 * @gfp: context flags
5821 *
5822 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5823 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5824 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5825 */
5826 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5827 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5828 s32 rssi_level,
5829 gfp_t gfp);
5830
5831 /**
5832 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5833 *
5834 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5835 * @gfp: context flags
5836 */
5837 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5838
5839 /**
5840 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5841 *
5842 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5843 */
5844 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5845
5846 /**
5847 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5848 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5849 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5850 *
5851 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5852 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5853 */
5854 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5855
5856 /**
5857 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5858 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5859 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5860 *
5861 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5862 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5863 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5864 */
5865 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5866 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5867
5868 /**
5869 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5870 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5871 */
5872 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5873
5874 /**
5875 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5876 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5877 */
5878 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5879
5880 /**
5881 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5882 *
5883 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5884 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5885 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5886 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5887 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5888 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5889 *
5890 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5891 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5892 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5893 */
5894 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5895 const u8 *addr);
5896
5897 /**
5898 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5899 * @pubsta: station struct
5900 * @tid: the session's TID
5901 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5902 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5903 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5904 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5905 *
5906 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5907 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5908 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5909 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5910 */
5911 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5912 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5913 u16 received_mpdus);
5914
5915 /**
5916 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5917 *
5918 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5919 * buffer.
5920 *
5921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5922 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5923 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5924 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5925 */
5926 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5927
5928 /**
5929 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5930 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5931 * @addr: station mac address
5932 * @tid: the rx tid
5933 */
5934 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5935 unsigned int tid);
5936
5937 /**
5938 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5939 *
5940 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5941 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5942 * reordering.
5943 *
5944 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5945 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5946 *
5947 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5948 * @addr: station mac address
5949 * @tid: the rx tid
5950 */
5951 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5952 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5953 {
5954 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5955 return;
5956 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5957 }
5958
5959 /**
5960 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5961 *
5962 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5963 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5964 * reordering.
5965 *
5966 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5967 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5968 *
5969 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5970 * @addr: station mac address
5971 * @tid: the rx tid
5972 */
5973 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5974 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5975 {
5976 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5977 return;
5978 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5979 }
5980
5981 /**
5982 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5983 *
5984 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5985 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5986 *
5987 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5988 *
5989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5990 * @addr: station mac address
5991 * @tid: the rx tid
5992 */
5993 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5994 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5995
5996 /* Rate control API */
5997
5998 /**
5999 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6000 *
6001 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6002 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6003 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6004 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6005 * to be filled in
6006 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6007 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6008 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6009 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6010 * RTS threshold
6011 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6012 * if the selected rate supports it
6013 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6014 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6015 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6016 */
6017 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6018 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6019 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6020 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6021 struct sk_buff *skb;
6022 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6023 bool rts, short_preamble;
6024 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6025 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6026 bool bss;
6027 };
6028
6029 /**
6030 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6031 */
6032 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6033 /**
6034 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6035 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6036 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6037 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6038 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6039 */
6040 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6041 };
6042
6043 struct rate_control_ops {
6044 unsigned long capa;
6045 const char *name;
6046 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6047 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6048 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6049 void (*free)(void *priv);
6050
6051 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6052 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6053 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6054 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6055 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6056 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6057 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6058 u32 changed);
6059 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6060 void *priv_sta);
6061
6062 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6063 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6064 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6065 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6066 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6067 struct sk_buff *skb);
6068 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6069 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6070
6071 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6072 struct dentry *dir);
6073
6074 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6075 };
6076
6077 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6078 enum nl80211_band band,
6079 int index)
6080 {
6081 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6082 }
6083
6084 static inline s8
6085 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6086 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6087 {
6088 int i;
6089
6090 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6091 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6092 return i;
6093
6094 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6095 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6096
6097 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6098 return 0;
6099 }
6100
6101 static inline
6102 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6103 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6104 {
6105 unsigned int i;
6106
6107 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6108 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6109 return true;
6110 return false;
6111 }
6112
6113 /**
6114 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6115 *
6116 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6117 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6118 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6119 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6120 *
6121 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6122 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6123 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6124 */
6125 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6126 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6127 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6128
6129 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6130 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6131
6132 static inline bool
6133 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6134 {
6135 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6136 }
6137
6138 static inline bool
6139 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6140 {
6141 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6142 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6143 }
6144
6145 static inline bool
6146 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6147 {
6148 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6149 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6150 }
6151
6152 static inline bool
6153 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6154 {
6155 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6156 }
6157
6158 static inline bool
6159 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6160 {
6161 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6162 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6163 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6164 }
6165
6166 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6167 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6168 {
6169 if (p2p) {
6170 switch (type) {
6171 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6172 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6173 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6174 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6175 default:
6176 break;
6177 }
6178 }
6179 return type;
6180 }
6181
6182 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6183 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6184 {
6185 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6186 }
6187
6188 /**
6189 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6190 *
6191 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6192 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6193 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6194 *
6195 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6196 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6197 * matching GroupId management frame.
6198 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6199 */
6200 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6201 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6202
6203 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6204 int rssi_min_thold,
6205 int rssi_max_thold);
6206
6207 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6208
6209 /**
6210 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6211 *
6212 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6213 *
6214 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6215 *
6216 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6217 * applicable.
6218 */
6219 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6220
6221 /**
6222 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6223 * @vif: virtual interface
6224 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6225 * @gfp: allocation flags
6226 *
6227 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6228 */
6229 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6230 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6231 gfp_t gfp);
6232
6233 /**
6234 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6235 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6236 * @vif: virtual interface
6237 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6238 * @band: the band to transmit on
6239 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6240 *
6241 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6242 */
6243 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6245 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6246
6247 /**
6248 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6249 *
6250 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6251 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6252 *
6253 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6254 *
6255 * private:
6256 *
6257 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6258 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6259 */
6260 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6261 u32 next_tsf;
6262 bool has_next_tsf;
6263
6264 u8 absent;
6265
6266 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6267 struct {
6268 u32 start;
6269 u32 duration;
6270 u32 interval;
6271 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6272 };
6273
6274 /**
6275 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6276 *
6277 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6278 * @data: NoA tracking data
6279 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6280 *
6281 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6282 */
6283 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6284 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6285
6286 /**
6287 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6288 *
6289 * @data: NoA tracking data
6290 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6291 */
6292 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6293
6294 /**
6295 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6296 * @vif: virtual interface
6297 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6298 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6299 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6300 * @gfp: allocation flags
6301 *
6302 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6303 */
6304 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6305 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6306 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6307
6308 /**
6309 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6310 *
6311 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6312 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6313 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6314 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6315 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6316 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6317 *
6318 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6319 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6320 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6321 *
6322 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6323 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6324 *
6325 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6326 */
6327 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6328
6329 /**
6330 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6331 *
6332 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6333 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6334 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6335 *
6336 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6337 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6338 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6339 *
6340 * @sta: the station
6341 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6342 */
6343 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6344
6345 /**
6346 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6347 *
6348 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6349 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6350 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6351 *
6352 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6353 *
6354 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6355 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6356 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6357 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6358 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6359 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6360 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6361 *
6362 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6363 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6364 */
6365 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6366 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6367
6368 /**
6369 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6370 * (in process context)
6371 *
6372 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6373 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6374 *
6375 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6376 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6377 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6378 */
6379 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6380 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6381 {
6382 struct sk_buff *skb;
6383
6384 local_bh_disable();
6385 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6386 local_bh_enable();
6387
6388 return skb;
6389 }
6390
6391 /**
6392 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6393 *
6394 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6395 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6396 *
6397 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6398 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6399 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6400 */
6401 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6402
6403 /**
6404 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6405 *
6406 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6407 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6408 *
6409 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6410 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6411 */
6412 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6413
6414 /* (deprecated) */
6415 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6416 {
6417 }
6418
6419 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6420 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6421
6422 /**
6423 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6424 *
6425 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6426 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6427 *
6428 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6429 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6430 *
6431 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6432 * this TXQ internally.
6433 */
6434 static inline void
6435 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6436 {
6437 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6438 }
6439
6440 /**
6441 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6442 *
6443 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6444 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6445 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6446 *
6447 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6448 * internally.
6449 */
6450 static inline void
6451 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6452 bool force)
6453 {
6454 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6455 }
6456
6457 /**
6458 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6459 *
6460 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6461 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6462 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6463 * next_txq().
6464 *
6465 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6466 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6467 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6468 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6469 * again.
6470 *
6471 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6472 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6473 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6474 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6475 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6476 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6477 *
6478 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6479 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6480 */
6481 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6482 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6483
6484 /**
6485 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6486 *
6487 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6488 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6489 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6490 *
6491 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6492 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6493 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6494 */
6495 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6496 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6497 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6498
6499 /**
6500 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6501 *
6502 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6503 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6504 *
6505 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6506 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6507 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6508 * @gfp: allocation flags
6509 */
6510 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6511 u8 inst_id,
6512 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6513 gfp_t gfp);
6514
6515 /**
6516 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6517 *
6518 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6519 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6520 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6521 *
6522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6523 * @match: match event information
6524 * @gfp: allocation flags
6525 */
6526 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6527 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6528 gfp_t gfp);
6529
6530 /**
6531 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6532 *
6533 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6534 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6535 *
6536 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6537 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6538 * information.
6539 * @len: frame length in bytes
6540 */
6541 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6542 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6543 int len);
6544
6545 /**
6546 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6547 *
6548 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6549 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6550 *
6551 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6552 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6553 * @len: frame length in bytes
6554 */
6555 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6556 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6557 int len);
6558 /**
6559 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6560 *
6561 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6562 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6563 * hardware or firmware.
6564 *
6565 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6566 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6567 */
6568 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6569
6570 /**
6571 * ieee80211_get_multi_bssid_mode - get a vifs multi bssid mode.
6572 *
6573 * This function is used to help look up the multi bssid mode which is tracked
6574 * inside the wdev.
6575 *
6576 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6577 */
6578 enum nl80211_multi_bssid_mode ieee80211_get_multi_bssid_mode(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6579
6580 /**
6581 * ieee80211_get_multi_bssid_parent - get a vifs multi bssid parent.
6582 *
6583 * This function is used to help look up the multi bssid parent which is tracked
6584 * inside the wdev.
6585 *
6586 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6587 */
6588 struct ieee80211_vif *ieee80211_get_multi_bssid_parent(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6589
6590 #endif /* MAC80211_H */